1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

Metal Carports & Carport Kits For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1241–1280 of 2723 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Green metal garage with two open bays sheltering an RV and boat, steel structure in mountains

22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

12

22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600
or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35RV Cover with Storage Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners run a 35-ft Class A or fifth-wheel down the center and frame in a 22×35 enclosed storage bay at the rear. The 12-foot leg height clears most rooftop A/Cs and slide-outs. A 12-ft-wide gable opening and a.

You’re viewing:RV Cover with Storage Bay·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600
or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$9,750
22×35
this size
$11,350
22×36
longer
$11,700
24×35
wider
$12,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • Open Front
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 rv cover with storage bay.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. RV owners run a 35-ft Class A or fifth-wheel down the center and frame in a 22×35 enclosed storage bay at the rear.

RV BAYDaily Driver22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft · tall walls

RV Cover with Storage Bay layout.

RV owners run a 35-ft Class A or fifth-wheel down the center and frame in a 22×35 enclosed storage bay at the rear. The 12-foot leg height clears most rooftop A/Cs and slide-outs. A 12-ft-wide gable opening and a 36-inch walk-in door handle access without trimming branches.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover with Storage Bay works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Storage Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Storage Bay spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with storage bay
Everyday rv cover with storage bay
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with storage bay + seasonal storage
rv cover with storage bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$236/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 rv cover with storage bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Storage Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Storage Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Storage Bay also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Storage Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 rv cover with storage bay cost?

A 22×35 rv cover with storage bay from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 rv cover with storage bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 rv cover with storage bay?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 rv cover with storage bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 rv cover with storage bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 rv cover with storage bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $236/month on a 22×35 rv cover with storage bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 rv cover with storage bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 rv cover with storage bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×35 rv cover with storage bay for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage bay to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Storage Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal garage with two open bays sheltering an RV and boat, steel structure in mountains

22×35 RV Cover with Storage Bay

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal building interior stacked with square hay bales beneath timber roof trusses

22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud, From $12,000

12

22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,700$12,000SAVE $1,700
or $250/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers park a compact tractor with a loader, a UTV, and a hay wagon under one roof. The 22-ft width fits a 7-ft brush hog turned sideways for off-season storage, and a sliding barn door on the long wall lets you.

You’re viewing:Hobby Farm Equipment Barn·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,000$13,700Save $1,700
or as low as $250/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$10,400
22×35
this size
$12,000
22×36
longer
$12,350
24×35
wider
$13,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Hobby farmers park a compact tractor with a loader, a UTV, and a hay wagon under one roof.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn layout.

Hobby farmers park a compact tractor with a loader, a UTV, and a hay wagon under one roof. The 22-ft width fits a 7-ft brush hog turned sideways for off-season storage, and a sliding barn door on the long wall lets you pull straight in from the pasture without a turn.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Farm Equipment Barn works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm equipment barn
Everyday hobby farm equipment barn
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
hobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$250/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $250/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn cost?

A 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $12,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $250/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $250/month on a 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×35 hobby farm equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal building interior stacked with square hay bales beneath timber roof trusses

22×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with wood wainscoting and dutch stall doors, horse looking out

22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $12,000

12

22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,700$12,000SAVE $1,700
or $250/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Two-Stall Horse Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners frame two 22×35 stalls down one wall and use the remaining 22×35 as a tack and feed room. The 35-ft length leaves a covered aisle for grooming and tack-up. Add gable vents and an insulated roof to.

You’re viewing:Two-Stall Horse Barn·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,000$13,700Save $1,700
or as low as $250/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$10,400
22×35
this size
$12,000
22×36
longer
$12,350
24×35
wider
$13,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Gable Vents
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-TWO-STALL-HORSE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 two-stall horse barn.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Rural property owners frame two 22×35 stalls down one wall and use the remaining 22×35 as a tack and feed room.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft

Two-Stall Horse Barn layout.

Rural property owners frame two 22×35 stalls down one wall and use the remaining 22×35 as a tack and feed room. The 35-ft length leaves a covered aisle for grooming and tack-up. Add gable vents and an insulated roof to keep the temperature livable through summer.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Stall Horse Barn works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Stall Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Stall Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Stall Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday two-stall horse barn
Everyday two-stall horse barn
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-stall horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
two-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$250/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 two-stall horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $250/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Stall Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Stall Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Stall Horse Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Stall Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 two-stall horse barn cost?

A 22×35 two-stall horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $12,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $250/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 two-stall horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 two-stall horse barn?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 two-stall horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 two-stall horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 two-stall horse barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $250/month on a 22×35 two-stall horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 two-stall horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 two-stall horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×35 two-stall horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Stall Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with wood wainscoting and dutch stall doors, horse looking out

22×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown steel building with open roll-up door storing a green compact tractor on a farm

22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $13,200

12

22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,050$13,200SAVE $1,850
or $275/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Detached Shop for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run the 22×35 as a mobile work base. A 22×35 roll-up parks the work van and trailer overnight, the long wall holds parts shelving, conduit racks, and bin storage, and a.

You’re viewing:Detached Shop for Contractors·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,200$15,050Save $1,850
or as low as $275/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$11,600
22×35
this size
$13,200
22×36
longer
$13,550
24×35
wider
$14,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Walk-In Door
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-DETACHED-SHOP-COBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 detached shop for contractors.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run the 22×35 as a mobile work base.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft

Detached Shop for Contractors layout.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run the 22×35 as a mobile work base. A 22×35 roll-up parks the work van and trailer overnight, the long wall holds parts shelving, conduit racks, and bin storage, and a wall-divided 22×35 office partition at the back keeps paperwork, dispatch, and a service desk separate from the bay. Stays under most commercial accessory permit thresholds.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Shop for Contractors works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Shop for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Shop for Contractors spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Shop for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday detached shop for contractors
Everyday detached shop for contractors
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached shop for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached shop for contractors + seasonal storage
detached shop for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$275/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 detached shop for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $275/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Shop for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Shop for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Shop for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Shop for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 detached shop for contractors cost?

A 22×35 detached shop for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $13,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $275/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 detached shop for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached shop for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 detached shop for contractors?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached shop for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 detached shop for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 detached shop for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 detached shop for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $275/month on a 22×35 detached shop for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 detached shop for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 detached shop for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×35 detached shop for contractors meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Shop for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown steel building with open roll-up door storing a green compact tractor on a farm

22×35 Detached Shop for Contractors

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Amber metal barn with open vehicle bay and black wainscot in evening mountain pasture

22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

12

22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600
or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Garage + Man Cave Combo

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo, built for daily backyard use.

Split the footprint into a 22×35 enclosed garage and a 22×35 finished man cave with a wall divider, separate walk-in entry, and dedicated HVAC penetrations. Insulation, a window package, and wainscoting on the cave side.

You’re viewing:Garage + Man Cave Combo·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600
or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$9,750
22×35
this size
$11,350
22×36
longer
$11,700
24×35
wider
$12,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Wall Divider
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-GARAGE-MAN-CAVE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 garage + man cave combo.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Split the footprint into a 22×35 enclosed garage and a 22×35 finished man cave with a wall divider, separate walk-in entry, and dedicated HVAC penetrations.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft

Garage + Man Cave Combo layout.

Split the footprint into a 22×35 enclosed garage and a 22×35 finished man cave with a wall divider, separate walk-in entry, and dedicated HVAC penetrations. Insulation, a window package, and wainscoting on the cave side keep it residential-grade without giving up shop space.

💡 Pro tip:Garage + Man Cave Combo works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage + Man Cave Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage + Man Cave Combo spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage + Man Cave Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday garage + man cave combo
Everyday garage + man cave combo
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage + man cave combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage + man cave combo + seasonal storage
garage + man cave combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$236/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 garage + man cave combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage + Man Cave Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage + Man Cave Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage + Man Cave Combo also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage + Man Cave Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 garage + man cave combo cost?

A 22×35 garage + man cave combo from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 garage + man cave combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage + man cave combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 garage + man cave combo?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage + man cave combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 garage + man cave combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 garage + man cave combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 garage + man cave combo without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $236/month on a 22×35 garage + man cave combo.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 garage + man cave combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 garage + man cave combo in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×35 garage + man cave combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×35 garage + man cave combo typically adds $6,160–$9,240 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage + Man Cave Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Amber metal barn with open vehicle bay and black wainscot in evening mountain pasture

22×35 Garage + Man Cave Combo

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

22×35 She Shed Studio

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 She Shed Studio | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

12

22×35 She Shed Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600
or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35She Shed Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 She Shed Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners convert the 22×35 into a backyard studio for pottery, quilting, or yoga. French doors on the gable end, a row of 22×35 windows down the long wall, and a Galvalume roof keep it cool and bright. Insulation and.

You’re viewing:She Shed Studio·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600
or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$9,750
22×35
this size
$11,350
22×36
longer
$11,700
24×35
wider
$12,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • French Doors
  • 5 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-SHE-SHED-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 she shed studio.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Homeowners convert the 22×35 into a backyard studio for pottery, quilting, or yoga.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑22′ × 35′ · 770 ground + loft

She Shed Studio layout.

Homeowners convert the 22×35 into a backyard studio for pottery, quilting, or yoga. French doors on the gable end, a row of 22×35 windows down the long wall, and a Galvalume roof keep it cool and bright. Insulation and a mini-split turn 770 sq ft into year-round usable space.

💡 Pro tip:She Shed Studio works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 She Shed Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She Shed Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She Shed Studio spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She Shed Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday she shed studio
Everyday she shed studio
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she shed studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe shed studio + seasonal storage
she shed studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 She Shed Studio, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$236/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 she shed studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She Shed Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 She Shed Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 She Shed Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She Shed Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She Shed Studio also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She Shed Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 she shed studio cost?

A 22×35 she shed studio from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 she shed studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she shed studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 she shed studio?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she shed studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 she shed studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 she shed studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 she shed studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $236/month on a 22×35 she shed studio.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 she shed studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 she shed studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×35 she shed studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she shed studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She Shed Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

22×35 She Shed Studio

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel structure with open bay door showing welding shop interior and yellow bollards

22×35 Small Fabrication Bay

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Small Fabrication Bay | Steel and Stud, From $13,600

12

22×35 Small Fabrication Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,500$13,600SAVE $1,900
or $283/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Small Fabrication Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Small Fabrication Bay, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Small fab shops mount a 2-ton jib crane to the 12-gauge frame and run plasma, MIG, and a welding table down the long wall. The 16-foot leg height clears a vertical band saw and a press brake. Spec a 22×35 roll-up on the.

You’re viewing:Small Fabrication Bay·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,600$15,500Save $1,900
or as low as $283/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$12,000
22×35
this size
$13,600
22×36
longer
$13,950
24×35
wider
$14,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16′ Leg Height
  • 14×14 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-SMALL-FABRICATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 small fabrication bay.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Small fab shops mount a 2-ton jib crane to the 12-gauge frame and run plasma, MIG, and a welding table down the long wall.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft

Small Fabrication Bay layout.

Small fab shops mount a 2-ton jib crane to the 12-gauge frame and run plasma, MIG, and a welding table down the long wall. The 16-foot leg height clears a vertical band saw and a press brake. Spec a 22×35 roll-up on the gable for steel stock and finished assemblies.

💡 Pro tip:Small Fabrication Bay works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Small Fabrication Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Fabrication Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Fabrication Bay spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Fabrication Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday small fabrication bay
Everyday small fabrication bay
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small fabrication bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall fabrication bay + seasonal storage
small fabrication bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Small Fabrication Bay, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$283/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 small fabrication bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $283/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Fabrication Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Small Fabrication Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Small Fabrication Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Fabrication Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Fabrication Bay also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Fabrication Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 small fabrication bay cost?

A 22×35 small fabrication bay from Steel and Stud starts at $13,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $283/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 small fabrication bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small fabrication bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 small fabrication bay?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small fabrication bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 small fabrication bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 small fabrication bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 small fabrication bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $283/month on a 22×35 small fabrication bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 small fabrication bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 small fabrication bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×35 small fabrication bay handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 22×35 small fabrication bay ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Small Fabrication Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel structure with open bay door showing welding shop interior and yellow bollards

22×35 Small Fabrication Bay

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel barn for hay storage with round bales stacked by open sliding door

22×35 Hay & Implement Storage

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Hay & Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $12,000

12

22×35 Hay & Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,700$12,000SAVE $1,700
or $250/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Hay & Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Hay & Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers stack 80 to 100 small square bales on pallets along one wall and park a tractor and a haybine under the same roof. Open gable ends keep airflow through the bales, and a 12-ft eave height clears a.

You’re viewing:Hay & Implement Storage·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,000$13,700Save $1,700
or as low as $250/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$10,400
22×35
this size
$12,000
22×36
longer
$12,350
24×35
wider
$13,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gables
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-HAY-IMPLEMENT-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 hay & implement storage.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Hobby farmers stack 80 to 100 small square bales on pallets along one wall and park a tractor and a haybine under the same roof.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft

Hay & Implement Storage layout.

Hobby farmers stack 80 to 100 small square bales on pallets along one wall and park a tractor and a haybine under the same roof. Open gable ends keep airflow through the bales, and a 12-ft eave height clears a round-baler arm without scraping the trusses.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Implement Storage works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Hay & Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & implement storage
Everyday hay & implement storage
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & implement storage + seasonal storage
hay & implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Hay & Implement Storage, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$250/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 hay & implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $250/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Hay & Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Hay & Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 hay & implement storage cost?

A 22×35 hay & implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $12,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $250/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 hay & implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 hay & implement storage?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 hay & implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 hay & implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 hay & implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $250/month on a 22×35 hay & implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 hay & implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 hay & implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×35 hay & implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel barn for hay storage with round bales stacked by open sliding door

22×35 Hay & Implement Storage

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

22×35 Self-Storage Annex

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Self-Storage Annex | Steel and Stud, From $13,200

12

22×35 Self-Storage Annex
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,050$13,200SAVE $1,850
or $275/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Self-Storage Annex

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Self-Storage Annex, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small operators add a 22×35 annex with five 22×35 storage units behind interior partitions and a center aisle. The 35-ft depth gives every unit street-frontage roll-up access. Low 9-ft eaves keep the build under most.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Annex·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,200$15,050Save $1,850
or as low as $275/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$11,600
22×35
this size
$13,200
22×36
longer
$13,550
24×35
wider
$14,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Interior Partitions
  • 5 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-SELF-STORAGE-ANNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 self-storage annex.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Small operators add a 22×35 annex with five 22×35 storage units behind interior partitions and a center aisle.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft shop

Self-Storage Annex layout.

Small operators add a 22×35 annex with five 22×35 storage units behind interior partitions and a center aisle. The 35-ft depth gives every unit street-frontage roll-up access. Low 9-ft eaves keep the build under most accessory-structure permit limits in residential zones.

💡 Pro tip:Self-Storage Annex works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Self-Storage Annex in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Annex.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Annex spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Annex.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage annex
Everyday self-storage annex
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage annex.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage annex + seasonal storage
self-storage annex + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Self-Storage Annex, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$275/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 self-storage annex is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $275/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Annex shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Self-Storage Annex buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Self-Storage Annex

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Annex · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Annex also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏛️ 22×35

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Annex questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 self-storage annex cost?

A 22×35 self-storage annex from Steel and Stud starts at $13,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $275/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 self-storage annex price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage annex ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 self-storage annex?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage annex different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 self-storage annex need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 self-storage annex delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 self-storage annex without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $275/month on a 22×35 self-storage annex.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 self-storage annex?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 self-storage annex in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×35 self-storage annex meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Annex quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

22×35 Self-Storage Annex

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white crossbuck double doors and galvanized roof at sunset on a farm

22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay | Steel and Stud, From $13,300

12

22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×35Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay, engineered to code for assembly use.

Small rural districts use a 22×35 as a single-engine apparatus bay with room for turnout gear lockers and a small office partition at the rear. A 22×35 roll-up clears most Type 6 brush trucks, and 12-gauge framing.

You’re viewing:Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay·Size22×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×35
22×30
smaller
$11,700
22×35
this size
$13,300
22×36
longer
$13,650
24×35
wider
$14,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 770 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • ASCE 7-22 Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X35-VOLUNTEER-FIRE-ABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay.

22 feet wide × 35 feet long. Small rural districts use a 22×35 as a single-engine apparatus bay with room for turnout gear lockers and a small office partition at the rear.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE22′ × 35′ · 770 sq ft

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay layout.

Small rural districts use a 22×35 as a single-engine apparatus bay with room for turnout gear lockers and a small office partition at the rear. A 22×35 roll-up clears most Type 6 brush trucks, and 12-gauge framing carries the snow load in mountain and plains districts.

💡 Pro tip:Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay works well at 22×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
770 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay spec sheet.

Width22′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space770 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday volunteer fire apparatus bay
Everyday volunteer fire apparatus bay
770 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a volunteer fire apparatus bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWvolunteer fire apparatus bay + seasonal storage
volunteer fire apparatus bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay, what makes it different.

770sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×35?

770 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 35′ footprint with 770 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,160–$9,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,465+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay also viewed:

🏡 22×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×35

Metal Workshop with 220V

22×35 metal workshop with 220v configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with 220V →

🎯 22×35

RV Cover with Storage Bay

22×35 rv cover with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×35 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🌾 22×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

22×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 22×35

Detached Shop for Contractors

22×35 detached shop for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop for Contractors →

🏡 22×35

Garage + Man Cave Combo

22×35 garage + man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Man Cave Combo →

🎯 22×35

She Shed Studio

22×35 she shed studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed Studio →

🏭 22×35

Small Fabrication Bay

22×35 small fabrication bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication Bay →

🌾 22×35

Hay & Implement Storage

22×35 hay & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Implement Storage →

🏢 22×35

Self-Storage Annex

22×35 self-storage annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Annex →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay cost?

A 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud volunteer fire apparatus bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay?

Almost always for 770+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud volunteer fire apparatus bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×35 volunteer fire apparatus bay pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white crossbuck double doors and galvanized roof at sunset on a farm

22×35 Volunteer Fire Apparatus Bay

770 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×35 steel building delivers 770 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Slate blue steel garage with black roll-up door and windows under an evening lakeside sky

25×25 Two-Car Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Two-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Two-Car Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Two-Car Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Two-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-bay garage pick this layout most often. Two full-size pickups (think two F-150s or a Tahoe plus a sedan) park side-by-side with about 18 inches between mirrors, leaving the front 4 feet.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Garage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-TWO-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 two-car garage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Homeowners outgrowing a single-bay garage pick this layout most often.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Two-Car Garage layout.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-bay garage pick this layout most often. Two full-size pickups (think two F-150s or a Tahoe plus a sedan) park side-by-side with about 18 inches between mirrors, leaving the front 4 feet open for shelving or a workbench wall. A 16-foot wide roll-up door or two 25×25 doors are both popular configs.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Garage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Two-Car Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Garage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car garage
Everyday two-car garage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car garage + seasonal storage
two-car garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Two-Car Garage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 two-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Two-Car Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Two-Car Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Garage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 two-car garage cost?

A 25×25 two-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 two-car garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 two-car garage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 two-car garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 two-car garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 two-car garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 two-car garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 two-car garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 two-car garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 two-car garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 two-car garage typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue steel garage with black roll-up door and windows under an evening lakeside sky

25×25 Two-Car Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

25×25 Detached Workshop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Detached Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Detached Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Detached Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Detached Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Tradespeople and serious DIY buyers run miter saws, table saws, and a welding bay inside this footprint. The 10-12 foot leg height clears a small lift or an overhead garage door opener. Two walk-in personnel doors plus.

You’re viewing:Detached Workshop·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 10′ Legs
  • Insulated Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-DETACHED-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 detached workshop.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Tradespeople and serious DIY buyers run miter saws, table saws, and a welding bay inside this footprint.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Detached Workshop layout.

Tradespeople and serious DIY buyers run miter saws, table saws, and a welding bay inside this footprint. The 10-12 foot leg height clears a small lift or an overhead garage door opener. Two walk-in personnel doors plus three 25×25 windows is the typical shop spec, code-friendly natural light without sacrificing wall space.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Workshop works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Detached Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Workshop spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday detached workshop
Everyday detached workshop
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached workshop + seasonal storage
detached workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Detached Workshop, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 detached workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Detached Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Detached Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Workshop also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 detached workshop cost?

A 25×25 detached workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 detached workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 detached workshop?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 detached workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 detached workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 detached workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 detached workshop.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 detached workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 detached workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 detached workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 detached workshop typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

25×25 Detached Workshop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal carport RV cover sheltering a fifth wheel camper at sunset among shade trees

25×25 RV Cover / Carport

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 RV Cover / Carport | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 RV Cover / Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25RV Cover / Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 RV Cover / Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class C motorhomes or fifth-wheels need 12-14 foot clearance. The 25-foot length covers most rigs end-to-end with a foot of overhang on each side. Open carport configs ship fastest. Add one or two.

You’re viewing:RV Cover / Carport·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Legs
  • Open Sides
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-RV-COVER-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 rv cover / carport.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. RV owners with Class C motorhomes or fifth-wheels need 12-14 foot clearance.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

RV Cover / Carport layout.

RV owners with Class C motorhomes or fifth-wheels need 12-14 foot clearance. The 25-foot length covers most rigs end-to-end with a foot of overhang on each side. Open carport configs ship fastest. Add one or two enclosed sides later if you want partial wind protection without losing airflow.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover / Carport works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 RV Cover / Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover / Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover / Carport spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover / Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover / carport
Everyday rv cover / carport
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover / carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover / carport + seasonal storage
rv cover / carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 RV Cover / Carport, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 rv cover / carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover / Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 RV Cover / Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 RV Cover / Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover / Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover / Carport also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover / Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 rv cover / carport cost?

A 25×25 rv cover / carport from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 rv cover / carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover / carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 rv cover / carport?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover / carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 rv cover / carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 rv cover / carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 rv cover / carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 rv cover / carport.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 rv cover / carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 rv cover / carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×25 rv cover / carport for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover / carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover / Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal carport RV cover sheltering a fifth wheel camper at sunset among shade trees

25×25 RV Cover / Carport

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with open front loafing shelter design on an autumn pasture with board fencing

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed | Steel and Stud, From $8,550

12

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,750$8,550SAVE $1,200
or $178/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers stack 8-12 round bales under cover with room left over for a tractor pass-through. The vertical roof sheds snow and rain straight off without pooling on horizontal seams. Open one or both 25-foot sides for.

You’re viewing:Hay Barn / Loafing Shed·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,550$9,750Save $1,200
or as low as $178/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$8,050
25×25
this size
$8,550
25×30
longer
$10,150
30×25
wider
$10,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • Open Gable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-HAY-BARN-LOAFINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Hobby farmers stack 8-12 round bales under cover with room left over for a tractor pass-through.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed layout.

Hobby farmers stack 8-12 round bales under cover with room left over for a tractor pass-through. The vertical roof sheds snow and rain straight off without pooling on horizontal seams. Open one or both 25-foot sides for equipment access; partial walls block prevailing wind without trapping humidity.

💡 Pro tip:Hay Barn / Loafing Shed works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Barn / Loafing Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Barn / Loafing Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hay barn / loafing shed
Everyday hay barn / loafing shed
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay barn / loafing shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay barn / loafing shed + seasonal storage
hay barn / loafing shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$178/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $178/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Barn / Loafing Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Barn / Loafing Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Barn / Loafing Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed cost?

A 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed from Steel and Stud starts at $8,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $178/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay barn / loafing shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay barn / loafing shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $178/month on a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Barn / Loafing Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with open front loafing shelter design on an autumn pasture with board fencing

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

25×25 She Shed / Studio

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 She Shed / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 She Shed / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25She Shed / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 She Shed / Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Buyers converting the build into an art studio, yoga space, or home office spec lower 8-10 foot legs to keep the interior cozy and easier to heat. Wainscoting in a contrasting color plus three storefront windows gives.

You’re viewing:She Shed / Studio·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 8′ Legs
  • Wainscoting
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-SHE-SHED-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 she shed / studio.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Buyers converting the build into an art studio, yoga space, or home office spec lower 8-10 foot legs to keep the interior cozy and easier to heat.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑25′ × 25′ · 625 ground + loft

She Shed / Studio layout.

Buyers converting the build into an art studio, yoga space, or home office spec lower 8-10 foot legs to keep the interior cozy and easier to heat. Wainscoting in a contrasting color plus three storefront windows gives the exterior a residential look that satisfies most HOA boards.

💡 Pro tip:She Shed / Studio works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 She Shed / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She Shed / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She Shed / Studio spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She Shed / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday she shed / studio
Everyday she shed / studio
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she shed / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe shed / studio + seasonal storage
she shed / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 She Shed / Studio, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 she shed / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She Shed / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 She Shed / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 She Shed / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She Shed / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She Shed / Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She Shed / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 she shed / studio cost?

A 25×25 she shed / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 she shed / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she shed / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 she shed / studio?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she shed / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 she shed / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 she shed / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 she shed / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 she shed / studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 she shed / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 she shed / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 she shed / studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 she shed / studio typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your She Shed / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

25×25 She Shed / Studio

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

25×25 Contractor Shop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Contractor Shop | Steel and Stud, From $9,750

12

25×25 Contractor Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,100$9,750SAVE $1,350
or $203/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Contractor Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Contractor Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 625 sq ft as a base of operations. One bay holds the work van, the other holds parts shelving and a small office partition. The 12-foot leg height lets a 25×25.

You’re viewing:Contractor Shop·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,750$11,100Save $1,350
or as low as $203/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$9,250
25×25
this size
$9,750
25×30
longer
$11,350
30×25
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 12′ Legs
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-CONTRACTOR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 contractor shop.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 625 sq ft as a base of operations.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Contractor Shop layout.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 625 sq ft as a base of operations. One bay holds the work van, the other holds parts shelving and a small office partition. The 12-foot leg height lets a 25×25 roll-up door clear a service body truck. 12-gauge framing is standard for daily commercial use.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Shop works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Contractor Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor shop
Everyday contractor shop
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor shop + seasonal storage
contractor shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Contractor Shop, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$203/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 contractor shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $203/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Contractor Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Contractor Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Shop also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 contractor shop cost?

A 25×25 contractor shop from Steel and Stud starts at $9,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $203/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 contractor shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 contractor shop?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 contractor shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 contractor shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 contractor shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $203/month on a 25×25 contractor shop.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 contractor shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 contractor shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×25 contractor shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

25×25 Contractor Shop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Man Cave / Hobby Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size. One project car on the lift, one daily driver beside it, and a back wall for the tool chest and parts washer. R-19 batt insulation plus a mini-split keeps.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / Hobby Garage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 9′ Legs
  • French Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-MAN-CAVE-HOBBY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 man cave / hobby garage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Man Cave / Hobby Garage layout.

Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size. One project car on the lift, one daily driver beside it, and a back wall for the tool chest and parts washer. R-19 batt insulation plus a mini-split keeps it usable year-round. Add a 25×25 roll-up plus a French door for finished-space curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / Hobby Garage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / hobby garage
Everyday man cave / hobby garage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / hobby garage + seasonal storage
man cave / hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 man cave / hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / Hobby Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage cost?

A 25×25 man cave / hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 man cave / hobby garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 man cave / hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 man cave / hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 man cave / hobby garage typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal barn with open equipment bay and wood post framing in a valley pasture

25×25 Equipment Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,550

12

25×25 Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,750$8,550SAVE $1,200
or $178/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn mower, and an ATV under one roof with implements hanging on the wall. The 12-foot peak clears a tractor with a roll bar and front-end.

You’re viewing:Equipment Storage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,550$9,750Save $1,200
or as low as $178/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$8,050
25×25
this size
$8,550
25×30
longer
$10,150
30×25
wider
$10,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • Open Front
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 equipment storage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn mower, and an ATV under one roof with implements hanging on the wall.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft shop

Equipment Storage layout.

Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn mower, and an ATV under one roof with implements hanging on the wall. The 12-foot peak clears a tractor with a roll bar and front-end loader. Gravel floor with auger ground anchors keeps the install cost low.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment Storage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage
Everyday equipment storage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage + seasonal storage
equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$178/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $178/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 equipment storage cost?

A 25×25 equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $178/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 equipment storage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $178/month on a 25×25 equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×25 equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal barn with open equipment bay and wood post framing in a valley pasture

25×25 Equipment Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with green trim sheltering a truck and SUV in a mountain meadow

25×25 Garage with Lean-To

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Garage with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Garage with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Garage with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Garage with Lean-To, built for daily backyard use.

Add a 10-foot single-sided lean-to and you’ve got a 25×25 enclosed garage plus 250 sq ft of covered outdoor work area for firewood, kayaks, or a riding mower. The lean-to ties into the main roofline and ships.

You’re viewing:Garage with Lean-To·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 10′ Lean-To
  • 10′ Legs
  • Combo Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-GARAGE-LEAN-TOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 garage with lean-to.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Add a 10-foot single-sided lean-to and you’ve got a 25×25 enclosed garage plus 250 sq ft of covered outdoor work area for firewood, kayaks, or a riding mower.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Garage with Lean-To layout.

Add a 10-foot single-sided lean-to and you’ve got a 25×25 enclosed garage plus 250 sq ft of covered outdoor work area for firewood, kayaks, or a riding mower. The lean-to ties into the main roofline and ships pre-engineered as one unit. Total covered footprint: 875 sq ft.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Lean-To works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Garage with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with lean-to
Everyday garage with lean-to
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with lean-to + seasonal storage
garage with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Garage with Lean-To, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 garage with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Garage with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Garage with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 garage with lean-to cost?

A 25×25 garage with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 garage with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 garage with lean-to?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 garage with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 garage with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 garage with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 garage with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 garage with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 garage with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 garage with lean-to add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 garage with lean-to typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with green trim sheltering a truck and SUV in a mountain meadow

25×25 Garage with Lean-To

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with open roll-up door storing a boat beside a mountain lake

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Boat & Trailer Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside or a kayak rack down the sidewall. Vertical-roof config keeps lake-effect snow off the gel coat. Lake-region buyers in MI, MN.

You’re viewing:Boat & Trailer Cover·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • 12′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-BOAT-TRAILER-COVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 boat & trailer cover.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside or a kayak rack down the sidewall.

TruckTrailer25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft pass-through

Boat & Trailer Cover layout.

A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside or a kayak rack down the sidewall. Vertical-roof config keeps lake-effect snow off the gel coat. Lake-region buyers in MI, MN, NY, and ME usually upgrade to 4:12 pitch for heavy-snow shedding.

💡 Pro tip:Boat & Trailer Cover works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer cover
Everyday boat & trailer cover
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer cover + seasonal storage
boat & trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 boat & trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 boat & trailer cover cost?

A 25×25 boat & trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 boat & trailer cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 boat & trailer cover?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 boat & trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 boat & trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 boat & trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 boat & trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 boat & trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 boat & trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×25 boat & trailer cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & trailer cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with open roll-up door storing a boat beside a mountain lake

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

25×25 Community / Church Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Community / Church Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,850

12

25×25 Community / Church Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,250$9,850SAVE $1,400
or $205/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Community / Church Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Community / Church Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 625 sq ft for folding-table storage, holiday decor bins, lawn equipment, and an event trailer. Two 25×25 roll-up doors on opposite walls allow drive-through access. Galvalume.

You’re viewing:Community / Church Storage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,850$11,250Save $1,400
or as low as $205/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$9,350
25×25
this size
$9,850
25×30
longer
$11,450
30×25
wider
$11,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume
  • 9′ Legs
  • Drive-Through
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-COMMUNITY-CHURCHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 community / church storage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 625 sq ft for folding-table storage, holiday decor bins, lawn equipment, and an event trailer.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Community / Church Storage layout.

Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 625 sq ft for folding-table storage, holiday decor bins, lawn equipment, and an event trailer. Two 25×25 roll-up doors on opposite walls allow drive-through access. Galvalume panels in a neutral color keep it inconspicuous on shared property.

💡 Pro tip:Community / Church Storage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Community / Church Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Church Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Church Storage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Church Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community / church storage
Everyday community / church storage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / church storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / church storage + seasonal storage
community / church storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Community / Church Storage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$205/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 community / church storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $205/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Church Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Community / Church Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Community / Church Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Church Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Church Storage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Church Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 community / church storage cost?

A 25×25 community / church storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $205/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 community / church storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / church storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 community / church storage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / church storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 community / church storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 community / church storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 community / church storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $205/month on a 25×25 community / church storage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 community / church storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 community / church storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×25 community / church storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Church Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

25×25 Community / Church Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal garage with black sectional door and black trim among lakeside pines

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners who want a true two-car detached garage pick the 22×40 over the 22×40 for the extra shoulder room between vehicles. Two F-150s park side-by-side with door-swing clearance, and the 40-ft length leaves a 10-ft.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 two-car detached garage.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Homeowners who want a true two-car detached garage pick the 22×40 over the 22×40 for the extra shoulder room between vehicles.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners who want a true two-car detached garage pick the 22×40 over the 22×40 for the extra shoulder room between vehicles. Two F-150s park side-by-side with door-swing clearance, and the 40-ft length leaves a 10-ft workbench bay at the rear wall. Two 22×40 roll-up doors on the gable end is the most-ordered config.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 two-car detached garage cost?

A 22×40 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 two-car detached garage typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal garage with black sectional door and black trim among lakeside pines

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black RV metal cover with open sides sheltering a Class A motorhome on a concrete pad

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40RV Cover with Workshop Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners running a Class A or fifth-wheel pick the 22×40 because the 40-ft length covers most travel rigs end-to-end with airflow at the gable. Bump leg height to 13 ft for the AC unit and slide-outs. Many buyers fully.

You’re viewing:RV Cover with Workshop Bay·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 13′ Legs
  • Hurricane Rated
  • Open Front Gable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-RV-COVER-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. RV owners running a Class A or fifth-wheel pick the 22×40 because the 40-ft length covers most travel rigs end-to-end with airflow at the gable.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

RV Cover with Workshop Bay layout.

RV owners running a Class A or fifth-wheel pick the 22×40 because the 40-ft length covers most travel rigs end-to-end with airflow at the gable. Bump leg height to 13 ft for the AC unit and slide-outs. Many buyers fully enclose three sides for tool storage and leave the front gable open as a drive-through carport.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover with Workshop Bay works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Workshop Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Workshop Bay spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Workshop Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with workshop bay
Everyday rv cover with workshop bay
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with workshop bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with workshop bay + seasonal storage
rv cover with workshop bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Workshop Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Workshop Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Workshop Bay also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Workshop Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay cost?

A 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with workshop bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with workshop bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with workshop bay to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Workshop Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black RV metal cover with open sides sheltering a Class A motorhome on a concrete pad

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Copper-toned metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door in autumn countryside

22×40 Hobby Workshop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Hobby Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Hobby Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Hobby Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Hobby Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Tradespeople and weekend builders order this size as a dedicated workshop with no vehicle parking. The 22-ft clear span fits a full table-saw outfeed, lumber rack, and assembly bench across the width. Add a 36-inch.

You’re viewing:Hobby Workshop·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 4 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-HOBBY-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 hobby workshop.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Tradespeople and weekend builders order this size as a dedicated workshop with no vehicle parking.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Hobby Workshop layout.

Tradespeople and weekend builders order this size as a dedicated workshop with no vehicle parking. The 22-ft clear span fits a full table-saw outfeed, lumber rack, and assembly bench across the width. Add a 36-inch walk-in door, four 22×40 windows, and an R-19 batt insulation package for year-round shop work.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Workshop works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Hobby Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Workshop spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby workshop
Everyday hobby workshop
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby workshop + seasonal storage
hobby workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Hobby Workshop, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 hobby workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Hobby Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Hobby Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Workshop also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 hobby workshop cost?

A 22×40 hobby workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 hobby workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 hobby workshop?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 hobby workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 hobby workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 hobby workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 hobby workshop.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 hobby workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 hobby workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 hobby workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 hobby workshop typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Copper-toned metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door in autumn countryside

22×40 Hobby Workshop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud, From $13,650

12

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,550$13,650SAVE $1,900
or $284/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Hay and Equipment Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers and rural property owners use the 22×40 metal barn for round-bale storage, a tractor bay, and a small tack room partition. Twelve to sixteen feet of leg height clears stacked round bales and a cab tractor.

You’re viewing:Hay and Equipment Barn·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,650$15,550Save $1,900
or as low as $284/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$12,350
22×40
this size
$13,650
22×45
longer
$15,250
24×40
wider
$14,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Legs
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Open 3-Sided
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-HAY-EQUIPMENT-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 hay and equipment barn.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Hobby farmers and rural property owners use the 22×40 metal barn for round-bale storage, a tractor bay, and a small tack room partition.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Hay and Equipment Barn layout.

Hobby farmers and rural property owners use the 22×40 metal barn for round-bale storage, a tractor bay, and a small tack room partition. Twelve to sixteen feet of leg height clears stacked round bales and a cab tractor. Many farms order it as a three-sided open barn with a sliding barn door on the closed gable.

💡 Pro tip:Hay and Equipment Barn works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay and Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay and Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay and Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay and equipment barn
Everyday hay and equipment barn
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay and equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay and equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay and equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$284/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 hay and equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $284/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay and Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay and Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay and Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay and Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 hay and equipment barn cost?

A 22×40 hay and equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $13,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $284/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 hay and equipment barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay and equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 hay and equipment barn?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay and equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 hay and equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 hay and equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 hay and equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $284/month on a 22×40 hay and equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 hay and equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 hay and equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 hay and equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay and Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red metal building with white roll up door beside steel stock and equipment yard

22×40 Contractor Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Contractor Shop | Steel and Stud, From $14,850

12

22×40 Contractor Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,950$14,850SAVE $2,100
or $309/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Contractor Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Contractor Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

HVAC, plumbing, and electrical contractors order this size as a fleet shop with one bay for a service van, one for tool storage, and a partitioned office at the rear. The 12-gauge frame upgrade is standard for.

You’re viewing:Contractor Shop·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,850$16,950Save $2,100
or as low as $309/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,550
22×40
this size
$14,850
22×45
longer
$16,450
24×40
wider
$16,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 12×12 Door
  • Commercial Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-CONTRACTOR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 contractor shop.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. HVAC, plumbing, and electrical contractors order this size as a fleet shop with one bay for a service van, one for tool storage, and a partitioned office at the rear.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Contractor Shop layout.

HVAC, plumbing, and electrical contractors order this size as a fleet shop with one bay for a service van, one for tool storage, and a partitioned office at the rear. The 12-gauge frame upgrade is standard for commercial use, and a 22×40 roll-up door lets you pull a box truck or skid-steer inside.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Shop works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Contractor Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor shop
Everyday contractor shop
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor shop + seasonal storage
contractor shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Contractor Shop, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$309/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 contractor shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $309/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Contractor Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Contractor Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 contractor shop cost?

A 22×40 contractor shop from Steel and Stud starts at $14,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $309/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 contractor shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 contractor shop?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 contractor shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 contractor shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 contractor shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $309/month on a 22×40 contractor shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 contractor shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 contractor shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×40 contractor shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red metal building with white roll up door beside steel stock and equipment yard

22×40 Contractor Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building garage apartment with monitor roof, cupola, and exterior stairs

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Man Cave or She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

When the use case is hangout space, not storage, buyers spec the 22×40 with full insulation, four large windows, French doors, and wainscoting in a contrasting trim color. Eight hundred eighty square feet runs a pool.

You’re viewing:Man Cave or She Shed·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 man cave or she shed.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. When the use case is hangout space, not storage, buyers spec the 22×40 with full insulation, four large windows, French doors, and wainscoting in a contrasting trim color.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑22′ × 40′ · 880 ground + loft

Man Cave or She Shed layout.

When the use case is hangout space, not storage, buyers spec the 22×40 with full insulation, four large windows, French doors, and wainscoting in a contrasting trim color. Eight hundred eighty square feet runs a pool table, bar area, lounge zone, and half-bath with room for a dart wall.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave or She Shed works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Man Cave or She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave or She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave or She Shed spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave or She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave or she shed
Everyday man cave or she shed
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave or she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave or she shed + seasonal storage
man cave or she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 man cave or she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave or She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Man Cave or She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Man Cave or She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave or She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave or She Shed also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave or She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 man cave or she shed cost?

A 22×40 man cave or she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 man cave or she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave or she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 man cave or she shed?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave or she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 man cave or she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 man cave or she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 man cave or she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 man cave or she shed.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 man cave or she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 man cave or she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 man cave or she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 man cave or she shed typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave or She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building garage apartment with monitor roof, cupola, and exterior stairs

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building horse barn with cupola, open bay, and grazing horse

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall) | Steel and Stud, From $13,650

12

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,550$13,650SAVE $1,900
or $284/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Horse Barn (4-Stall)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall), built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian buyers configure the 22×40 as a four-stall horse barn with a 10-ft center aisle and 22×40 stalls down both 40-ft walls. The 22-ft width is the minimum for a true center-aisle barn. Add a sliding barn door on.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn (4-Stall)·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,650$15,550Save $1,900
or as low as $284/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$12,350
22×40
this size
$13,650
22×45
longer
$15,250
24×40
wider
$14,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 4 Stalls
  • Center Aisle
  • Ridge Vent
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-HORSE-BARN-4-STABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 horse barn (4-stall).

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Equestrian buyers configure the 22×40 as a four-stall horse barn with a 10-ft center aisle and 22×40 stalls down both 40-ft walls.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Horse Barn (4-Stall) layout.

Equestrian buyers configure the 22×40 as a four-stall horse barn with a 10-ft center aisle and 22×40 stalls down both 40-ft walls. The 22-ft width is the minimum for a true center-aisle barn. Add a sliding barn door on each gable, two Dutch doors per stall, and ridge venting for airflow.

💡 Pro tip:Horse Barn (4-Stall) works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn (4-Stall).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn (4-Stall) spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn (4-Stall).

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn (4-stall)
Everyday horse barn (4-stall)
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn (4-stall).
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn (4-stall) + seasonal storage
horse barn (4-stall) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall), what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$284/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $284/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn (4-Stall) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn (4-Stall) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn (4-Stall) also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn (4-Stall) questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) cost?

A 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) from Steel and Stud starts at $13,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $284/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn (4-stall) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall)?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn (4-stall) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $284/month on a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall).

What warranty comes with the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn (4-Stall) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building horse barn with cupola, open bay, and grazing horse

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit detailing shop with black SUV and supply wall inside

22×40 Auto Repair Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $14,850

12

22×40 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,950$14,850SAVE $2,100
or $309/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Auto Repair Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Independent mechanics order the 22×40 as a single-bay shop with a 12-ft leg height that clears a two-post lift. The 40-ft length fits a lift, a tear-down bay, and a parts-and-tool wall. A 22×40 roll-up door on the gable.

You’re viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,850$16,950Save $2,100
or as low as $309/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,550
22×40
this size
$14,850
22×45
longer
$16,450
24×40
wider
$16,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Two-Post Lift Clear
  • 10×10 Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 auto repair shop.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Independent mechanics order the 22×40 as a single-bay shop with a 12-ft leg height that clears a two-post lift.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Auto Repair Shop layout.

Independent mechanics order the 22×40 as a single-bay shop with a 12-ft leg height that clears a two-post lift. The 40-ft length fits a lift, a tear-down bay, and a parts-and-tool wall. A 22×40 roll-up door on the gable plus a walk-in side door is the standard layout.

💡 Pro tip:Auto Repair Shop works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Auto Repair Shop, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$309/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $309/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 auto repair shop cost?

A 22×40 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $14,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $309/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 auto repair shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $309/month on a 22×40 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×40 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit detailing shop with black SUV and supply wall inside

22×40 Auto Repair Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open bay metal shed with red end wall and black frame on sunset farmland hills

22×40 Storage Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $15,250

12

22×40 Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,400$15,250SAVE $2,150
or $318/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Small businesses and self-storage operators use the 22×40 as a single-tenant unit or a partitioned three-bay storage building. Drop in two interior steel-stud walls and you get three 22×40 bays, each with its own.

You’re viewing:Storage Building·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,250$17,400Save $2,150
or as low as $318/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,950
22×40
this size
$15,250
22×45
longer
$16,850
24×40
wider
$16,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 3 Partition Bays
  • 3 Roll-Up Doors
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 storage building.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Small businesses and self-storage operators use the 22×40 as a single-tenant unit or a partitioned three-bay storage building.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft shop

Storage Building layout.

Small businesses and self-storage operators use the 22×40 as a single-tenant unit or a partitioned three-bay storage building. Drop in two interior steel-stud walls and you get three 22×40 bays, each with its own roll-up door. The 14-gauge frame and 29-gauge panels keep the kit price under budget.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building
Everyday storage building
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building + seasonal storage
storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Storage Building, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$318/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $318/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 storage building cost?

A 22×40 storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $15,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $318/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 storage building?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $318/month on a 22×40 storage building.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 22×40 storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open bay metal shed with red end wall and black frame on sunset farmland hills

22×40 Storage Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit with tall gable, white roll-up door and boat parked on gravel

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Boat and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake and coastal homeowners store a wake boat on a tandem trailer, two jet skis, and a tow vehicle inside a 22×40. The 40-ft length clears most 24-ft hulls with trailer tongue. Hurricane-rated certification is standard.

You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • Hurricane Cert
  • 12′ Legs
  • 10×10 Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 boat and toy storage.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Lake and coastal homeowners store a wake boat on a tandem trailer, two jet skis, and a tow vehicle inside a 22×40.

RV BAYDaily Driver22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft · tall walls

Boat and Toy Storage layout.

Lake and coastal homeowners store a wake boat on a tandem trailer, two jet skis, and a tow vehicle inside a 22×40. The 40-ft length clears most 24-ft hulls with trailer tongue. Hurricane-rated certification is standard on FL, TX, NC, SC, and LA Gulf Coast orders for insurance compliance.

💡 Pro tip:Boat and Toy Storage works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and toy storage
Everyday boat and toy storage
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and toy storage + seasonal storage
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Boat and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 boat and toy storage cost?

A 22×40 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 boat and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 boat and toy storage?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 boat and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 boat and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 boat and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 boat and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 boat and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×40 boat and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit with tall gable, white roll-up door and boat parked on gravel

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

22×40 Community or Church Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Community or Church Building | Steel and Stud, From $14,950

12

22×40 Community or Church Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Community or Church Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Community or Church Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Small congregations and rural community groups use the 22×40 as a fellowship hall, classroom annex, or food-pantry warehouse. Stamped engineered drawings and IBC-certified construction make the permit process.

You’re viewing:Community or Church Building·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,650
22×40
this size
$14,950
22×45
longer
$16,550
24×40
wider
$16,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • IBC Certified
  • Stamped Drawings
  • HVAC Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-COMMUNITY-CHURCHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 community or church building.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Small congregations and rural community groups use the 22×40 as a fellowship hall, classroom annex, or food-pantry warehouse.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Community or Church Building layout.

Small congregations and rural community groups use the 22×40 as a fellowship hall, classroom annex, or food-pantry warehouse. Stamped engineered drawings and IBC-certified construction make the permit process straightforward in most county permit offices. Add HVAC-ready framed openings and full R-19 insulation.

💡 Pro tip:Community or Church Building works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Community or Church Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community or Church Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community or Church Building spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community or Church Building.

DAILY USEEveryday community or church building
Everyday community or church building
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community or church building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity or church building + seasonal storage
community or church building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Community or Church Building, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 community or church building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community or Church Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Community or Church Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Community or Church Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community or Church Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community or Church Building also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community or Church Building questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 community or church building cost?

A 22×40 community or church building from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 community or church building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community or church building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 community or church building?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community or church building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 community or church building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 community or church building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 community or church building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×40 community or church building.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 community or church building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 community or church building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 community or church building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community or Church Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

22×40 Community or Church Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with triple bay black doors and family vehicles parked outside

22×40 Garage with Loft

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Garage with Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Buyers who need extra storage without a bigger footprint order the 22×40 with a 14-ft leg height and an engineered mezzanine over the back 12 feet. That adds roughly 264 sq ft of upper-level storage above the parking.

You’re viewing:Garage with Loft·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Legs
  • Engineered Mezzanine
  • +264 sq ft Loft
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-GARAGE-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 garage with loft.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Buyers who need extra storage without a bigger footprint order the 22×40 with a 14-ft leg height and an engineered mezzanine over the back 12 feet.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Garage with Loft layout.

Buyers who need extra storage without a bigger footprint order the 22×40 with a 14-ft leg height and an engineered mezzanine over the back 12 feet. That adds roughly 264 sq ft of upper-level storage above the parking bays. Pair with a pull-down attic ladder or a fixed staircase on the side wall.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Loft works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with loft
Everyday garage with loft
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with loft + seasonal storage
garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Garage with Loft, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 garage with loft cost?

A 22×40 garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 garage with loft?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 garage with loft typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with triple bay black doors and family vehicles parked outside

22×40 Garage with Loft

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Wood-look metal building office studio with corner porch and large glass windows in a backyard

10×10 Backyard Home Office

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Remote workers convert this into a 100 sq ft home office with R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, a desk wall, and a window seat. The 10×10 prefab building skips county permits in most jurisdictions when there’s no.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Vertical Roof
  • Window Wall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 backyard home office.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Remote workers convert this into a 100 sq ft home office with R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, a desk wall, and a window seat.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Backyard Home Office layout.

Remote workers convert this into a 100 sq ft home office with R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, a desk wall, and a window seat. The 10×10 prefab building skips county permits in most jurisdictions when there’s no plumbing, an easy backyard add.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Home Office works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 backyard home office cost?

A 10×10 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 backyard home office?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 backyard home office typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Wood-look metal building office studio with corner porch and large glass windows in a backyard

10×10 Backyard Home Office

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

10×10 Garden Building with Window

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Garden Building with Window | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Garden Building with Window
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Garden Building with Window

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Garden Building with Window, built for daily backyard use.

Gardeners want light and airflow. This 10×10 metal building with windows runs a single-hung 10×10 on the side wall plus a walk-in door, leaving the back and end walls free for potting benches and pegboard. Add a.

You’re viewing:Garden Building with Window·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 30×30 Window
  • Skylight Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-GARDEN-BUILDING-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 garden building with window.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Gardeners want light and airflow.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft shop

Garden Building with Window layout.

Gardeners want light and airflow. This 10×10 metal building with windows runs a single-hung 10×10 on the side wall plus a walk-in door, leaving the back and end walls free for potting benches and pegboard. Add a skylight for seed-starting in spring.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Building with Window works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Garden Building with Window in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Building with Window.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Building with Window spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Building with Window.

DAILY USEEveryday garden building with window
Everyday garden building with window
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden building with window.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden building with window + seasonal storage
garden building with window + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Garden Building with Window, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 garden building with window is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Building with Window shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Garden Building with Window buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Garden Building with Window

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Building with Window · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Building with Window also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Building with Window questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 garden building with window cost?

A 10×10 garden building with window from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 garden building with window price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden building with window ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 garden building with window?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden building with window different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 garden building with window need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 garden building with window delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 garden building with window without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 garden building with window.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 garden building with window?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 garden building with window in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 garden building with window add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 garden building with window typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Building with Window quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

10×10 Garden Building with Window

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Carport for Single Vehicle

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle, built for hobby and recreational use.

A 10×10 carport metal cover handles one compact car, a UTV, or a motorcycle pair under roof. Open-sided framing keeps cost in the $1,500-$1,700 range and skips most permit thresholds. Add one or two side walls later if.

You’re viewing:Carport for Single Vehicle·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • Boxed Eave
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-CARPORT-SINGLE-VBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 carport for single vehicle.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. A 10×10 carport metal cover handles one compact car, a UTV, or a motorcycle pair under roof.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Carport for Single Vehicle layout.

A 10×10 carport metal cover handles one compact car, a UTV, or a motorcycle pair under roof. Open-sided framing keeps cost in the $1,500-$1,700 range and skips most permit thresholds. Add one or two side walls later if you decide you want wind protection.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Single Vehicle works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Single Vehicle.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Single Vehicle spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Single Vehicle.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for single vehicle
Everyday carport for single vehicle
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for single vehicle.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for single vehicle + seasonal storage
carport for single vehicle + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 carport for single vehicle is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Single Vehicle shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Single Vehicle · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Single Vehicle also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Single Vehicle questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 carport for single vehicle cost?

A 10×10 carport for single vehicle from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 carport for single vehicle price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for single vehicle ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 carport for single vehicle?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for single vehicle different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 carport for single vehicle need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 carport for single vehicle delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 carport for single vehicle without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 carport for single vehicle.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 carport for single vehicle?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 carport for single vehicle in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×10 carport for single vehicle for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a carport for single vehicle to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Single Vehicle quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Modern sage green steel building garage apartment with shed roof and black glass garage door

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Tool Shed for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists building out a tool shed get a full wall of pegboard, a 6-foot workbench, and a rolling tool chest in 100 sq ft. The 10×10 steel shed framing accepts French cleats anywhere along the studs, which a stamped tin.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Hobbyists·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Insulation Ready
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-TOOL-SHED-HOBBYIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Hobbyists building out a tool shed get a full wall of pegboard, a 6-foot workbench, and a rolling tool chest in 100 sq ft.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Tool Shed for Hobbyists layout.

Hobbyists building out a tool shed get a full wall of pegboard, a 6-foot workbench, and a rolling tool chest in 100 sq ft. The 10×10 steel shed framing accepts French cleats anywhere along the studs, which a stamped tin big-box shed won’t.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Hobbyists works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for hobbyists
Everyday tool shed for hobbyists
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for hobbyists + seasonal storage
tool shed for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists cost?

A 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Modern sage green steel building garage apartment with shed roof and black glass garage door

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building toy garage at sunset with yellow motorcycle and canoe inside the open bay

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Motorcycle & ATV Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding mower fits if you stagger the angle. Roll-up door at 8’x7′ clears handlebars; a walk-in side door means you don’t have to open.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & ATV Garage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • 9′ Sidewall
  • Lockable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding mower fits if you stagger the angle.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Motorcycle & ATV Garage layout.

Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding mower fits if you stagger the angle. Roll-up door at 8’x7′ clears handlebars; a walk-in side door means you don’t have to open the big door for a quick grab.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & ATV Garage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & ATV Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & ATV Garage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & ATV Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & atv garage
Everyday motorcycle & atv garage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & atv garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & atv garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & atv garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & ATV Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & ATV Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & ATV Garage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & ATV Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage cost?

A 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & atv garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & ATV Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building toy garage at sunset with yellow motorcycle and canoe inside the open bay

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

10×10 Pool Equipment House

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Pool Equipment House | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Pool Equipment House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Pool Equipment House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Pool Equipment House, built for daily backyard use.

Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats. Vented gable ends keep chlorine fumes from condensing on steel. Locked roll-up door keeps kids out of the chemical.

You’re viewing:Pool Equipment House·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Vented Gables
  • Lockable
  • Galvalume Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-POOL-EQUIPMENT-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 pool equipment house.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Pool Equipment House layout.

Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats. Vented gable ends keep chlorine fumes from condensing on steel. Locked roll-up door keeps kids out of the chemical shelf.

💡 Pro tip:Pool Equipment House works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Pool Equipment House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool Equipment House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool Equipment House spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool Equipment House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool equipment house
Everyday pool equipment house
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool equipment house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool equipment house + seasonal storage
pool equipment house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Pool Equipment House, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 pool equipment house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool Equipment House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Pool Equipment House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Pool Equipment House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool Equipment House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool Equipment House also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool Equipment House questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 pool equipment house cost?

A 10×10 pool equipment house from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 pool equipment house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool equipment house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 pool equipment house?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool equipment house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 pool equipment house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 pool equipment house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 pool equipment house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 pool equipment house.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 pool equipment house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 pool equipment house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 pool equipment house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 pool equipment house typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool Equipment House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

10×10 Pool Equipment House

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10She-Shed / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room, built for hobby and recreational use.

Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows. Wainscoting in a contrasting color and a Barn Red roof reads more.

You’re viewing:She-Shed / Hobby Room·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Two Windows
  • Painted Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-SHE-SHED-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 she-shed / hobby room.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑10′ × 10′ · 100 ground + loft

She-Shed / Hobby Room layout.

Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows. Wainscoting in a contrasting color and a Barn Red roof reads more cottage than utility.

💡 Pro tip:She-Shed / Hobby Room works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed / hobby room
Everyday she-shed / hobby room
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed / hobby room + seasonal storage
she-shed / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 she-shed / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room cost?

A 10×10 she-shed / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she-shed / hobby room to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Carport Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Carport Owners Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their metal carport.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I ordered two carports for the Healthy Schools Healthy Communities grant in Cabool, MO. Bill went above and beyond — thorough on every detail, called me right back, walked me through the whole order. He even followed up on instructions for the slab pour."

HS
Grant Coordinator
Cabool, MO
Metal Carports
Common Questions

Metal Carport FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard carport units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span carports may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a carport with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific carport model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your carport is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your carport with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential carport sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car carports (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car carports (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide carports (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Carport Sizes and Dimensions Guide

Metal carport dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car carports and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car carports (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car carports (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide carports (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length carport. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a Metal Carport Cost in 2026?

Metal carport prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car carport up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel carport prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider carports cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY carport kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 carports per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

Metal Carport Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car carport in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your carport is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart